JP7286515B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, include electronic parts such as display means such as liquid crystal displays and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

As this type of game machine, for example, there is a game machine capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

There is room for improving the marketability of the gaming machine having the functions and configuration described in Patent Document 1.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
The display means provides a pending animation after the specific display is displayed at a fixed position when the starting condition is met and the specific light emitting effect is executed, and Displaying in a common manner a pending animation after the specific display is displayed at a fixed position when not executed,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a first specific effect suggesting control to the advantageous state and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect during one variable display,
The light emitting means
When the first specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the first specific effect is started, and the first specific effect is performed. When the is started, start emitting light in a manner corresponding to the first specific effect,
When the second specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the second specific effect is started, and the second specific effect is performed. When is started, start emitting light in a manner corresponding to the second specific effect,
When the light emission in the mode corresponding to the first specific effect is started from the light emission in the mode according to the specific light emission effect, and the light emission in the mode according to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the second specific effect is started and the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
There are a case where the specific display is displayed in the special mode and a case where the specific display is displayed in the first special mode without being displayed in the special mode, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode without being displayed in the special mode. Expensive, amusement machine.
In addition, the game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, pachinko machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
with
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). ) (see FIGS. 10-12),
moreover,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, Figures 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), Figures 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), from before the display of the pending indication is completed The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (entering the game ball into the starting area), as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-105941, the identification based on the establishment of the predetermined condition The display (suspended display or active display) is displayed on the display means, and for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a pre-reading notice is executed that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display. In some cases, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice (specific light-emitting effect) by causing the light-emitting means to emit light. However, in such a gaming machine, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, Figures 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), Figures 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), from before the display of the pending indication is completed The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of image display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3; It is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production|presentation unit from diagonally front. (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (C) is an E- of FIG. 10-7 (A) It is E sectional drawing. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED board, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11B is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B); (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view along GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view along HH in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20; It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual recognition condition of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit light-emit. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display display start effect execution processing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starter switch 22A, second starter switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are invisible or invisible to the player,
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
with
The predetermined member is characterized by having a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, general-purpose products can be used for the predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player, without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or 2,
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position spaced apart from the display means more than the specific member (for example, an upper portion of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Provided above the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side from the electronic components (e.g., a protruding portion 3A),
The projecting portion is characterized by being larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the projecting portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to form 4,
The electronic components (eg, LED substrates 603, 803) and the specific members (eg, base members 601, 801) are dark (eg, black) (modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component is more likely to be lost in the shadow of the projecting portion, making it less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the visibility of the specific member is higher than that of the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specified member (eg, base member 301) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) at least partially common to the mode of the circuit pattern (eg, printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. provided (see Figures 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to form 7 or 8,
The specific member (eg, base member 301) has a predetermined region (eg, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the translucent member (eg, cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) identical or similar in form to the decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined region (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to recognize that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are placed so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the decorative parts make it difficult to see the boundaries between the electronic parts and the specific parts, making the electronic parts less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized by being larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorations, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The translucent member (eg, cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding region corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (e.g., convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., region other than convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The translucency of the boundary corresponding area is lower than that of the non-boundary corresponding area.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is less visible to the player through the boundary corresponding area, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 11 or 12,
A logotype (eg, the letter “V”) is displayed on the decorative portion (eg, the decorative portion 420) (see FIGS. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player is less likely to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (eg, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (eg, second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIGS. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous by light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of 405 substantially uniformly and is incident on the area corresponding to the convex portion 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 801), a rendering means (e.g., third rendering unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. provided (see Figures 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic parts, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous, so the degree of freedom in design is increased. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The effect means (eg, third effect unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
A rendering section (eg, light-emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (FIG. 10 -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 18,
The rendering section (eg, light emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) has a higher visibility than the color of the electronic component (eg, LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with high .
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light-emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A and 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
It further comprises a specific translucent member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) at which the light entering the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) is transmitted in a predetermined direction (e.g., T direction) is higher than the light entering the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the light-transmitting member is lower than that of the specific light-transmitting member, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous. degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The plate thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the translucency of the translucent member is low, the electronic components are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is a color similar to that of the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left corner of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big win opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by the staff of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed in the board case together with the main board 11 . The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A substrate case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the kind of big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The effect data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which the progression of effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11 and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach A reach effects, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows SP reach A reach It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the content of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. During the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation information is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIGS. 8-7 show an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common effect display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight against each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image gradually changes from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250, 600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image with gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to enhance the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since the text image display using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, an increase in the data volume of the moving image data and an increase in the processing load of the image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in gold and the character decoration is set to the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds luster, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a text image with a different display color and background display from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIGS. 8-9 show display examples when a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions is changed according to the elapsed time in the arbitrary execution of the effect, not limited to the situation in which the music is played or the voice of the dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part displayed in a display style different from that of other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby improving the player's impression of the display of the text image.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. When displaying a predetermined specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode without being limited to the display color of the text image. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operation with the operation rod of the stick controller 31A. may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the , or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display is increased. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means, when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, controls the character image may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small pattern display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display area 01AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 01AKB2 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size from the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, the small symbols are displayed in a simple manner so that the display contents and display results of the small symbols can be prevented from being misunderstood by the player. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns as reduced identification information is performed, and finalized small patterns as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 9B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that instructs color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal register of the VDP91AK132 stores control data specifying the operation target included in the display list, numeric data specifying parameters, and other register values. By storing the register value according to the execution command, Drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this manner, a synthesized reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

When performing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and , and perform difference calculation processing. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", then 255-80=175 is obtained, thereby inverting the color information. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is converted to an image in which the color information is inverted. can be changed to render the generated image.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. A plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data are used to execute synthesis processing by color blending, such as alpha blending, to perform blur processing. The image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that the image is a modified image.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data, for example. do. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain an image subjected to monochrome conversion.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. An image that has undergone blurring processing by executing synthesis processing using color blending, such as alpha blending, using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so as to obtain an image with a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows an example of screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effects images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Draw possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is the depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You can do it like this.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the small value as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with the large value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed to generate the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after synthesizing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 so as to be superimposed as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147. It should be memorized. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 executes, for example, one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. color blend according to the In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 is drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command by some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It suffices to store the images in the screen display frame buffer while synthesizing them according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blend for effect. can.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 and the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and uses the VRAM 91AK 147 for screen display. It can be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers, by a drawing command. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. can be done.

Thus, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . In addition, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. On the other hand, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and stores it in the VRAM 91AK 147. Then, the data is transferred to the frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are changed without color blending for effect. can be drawn for screen display without

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list containing the drawing commands for effects, the image data to be subjected to effect processing are the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated respectively. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4, and effect image data 01AKD04 placed on the layer 01AKL5. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. memorize with The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn by the drawing command included in the display list, for example. , and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is specified next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read and superimposed on the image data 01AKD02 and 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 in which the color information is changed by color blending for effect, and the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 after the conversion are given priority for display. The data are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order according to the frequency. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and display various images for effects such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for increasing chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, in 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, drawing is performed by normal drawing processing without color blending for effects, and effects images showing pending display and active display, effect images showing small symbols, etc., are displayed according to the progress of the game. A related predetermined image can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. .

FIG. 9-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among color blends for effect is displayed in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for rendering with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, are drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data as specific drawing processing, A production image can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 9-6B shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list containing command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by difference calculation processing for converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing, and an effect image is drawn. can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is processed by combining color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information contained in the . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring due to rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information or the like corresponding to the image data by the normal drawing process, and display a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to create an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. As a result, even an effect image drawn using common image data can be drawn by changing color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing, and to execute various display effects to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a setting example of the reliability of the big hit according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of cases where the variable display result is "big win" and controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big hit is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set differently according to multiple types of ready-to-win effects. It is good if there is.

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach with a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. is. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the presentation mode in which the difference can be recognized is arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary display using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. light emission, any action using the movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, the image drawn in response to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to display the image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect good. When the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if it includes the case of executing the display of the image drawn in response to only the drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing effect good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The content of the drawing effect includes presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect draws and displays an effect image that has undergone monochrome conversion using command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. In the color information inversion effect, command 02 among the effect drawing commands is used to draw and display an effect image in which color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

A strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single-color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawing It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When the variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result and the ready-to-win effect content, A drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Fig. 9-8, when the variable display result is "losing", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is drawn at a rate of 60% (= 60/100) Effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and 5% (=5 /100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5% = (5/100). be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the content of reach effect is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100). Drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios in which the variable display result is "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. Then, when the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big win", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". The ratio of determination to the drawing effect pattern other than the pattern increases. Therefore, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect by effect display or strobe display, is executed, it is more likely than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state increases. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 are set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high hit reliability, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine any one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. . When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with lower reliability of big win than SP ready-to-B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, execution of the specific drawing performance increases the ratio of control to the big win game state, so super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win. Even with the ready-to-win effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect increases the expectation of the player and appropriately enhances the game interest.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, a pattern other than drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 may be determined at a lower rate than when the content of ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach-B, compared to the range in which the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach A1 to A3, there is a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate. may be set as a limit.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect for super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is performed. become viable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the output of BGM and sound effects good. In addition, during the effect execution period D0, when the decorative design is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, or when the "left", "middle" and "right" ', the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop displaying the decorative patterns that constitute the pseudo consecutive chances, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are turned on in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to execute a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. It may be possible to perform a production.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. becomes viable. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. may be When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is performed in the normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying fixed decoration patterns, etc., which are the result of variable display. It suffices to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Also, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning before the variable display for executing the ready-to-win performance of super-to-win. You may do so. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, as in the case of executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 Images drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emission performance using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is viable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period during which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in which the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is enabled. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying is executed, there is a limitation as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve amusement in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emitting effect by light emission of the light emitting member, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. A limitation may be provided to the effect mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the effect amount of the light emitting effect more than in the case of using the light emitting effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect amount is reduced by reducing the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. A limit may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 show an effect execution example when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win game is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative patterns corresponding to the number "7" are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) to establish a ready-to-win state. , reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient if it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, corresponding to the effect execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win effect with different effect contents depending on the result of the variable display is executed. Then, the fixed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, in response to the effect execution period D4, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the pause display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of temporary stop display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, temporary stop display can be performed along with strobe display. . After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is returned to and the light emission effect is executed.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed in accordance with the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR does not affect the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and to execute various display effects to improve amusement in the game.

In FIG. 9-12(A), corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, when the chance-up effect during reach is executed, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows an effect execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific rendering effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, as in the effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 9-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion, which is drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying with , it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the stroboscopic display.

Effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be varied, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the display effect can be achieved while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 9-13(A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by the color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. It shows an effect execution example 02AKM31. Compared with the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(C) is an effect execution example in which, following effect execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during execution of a chance-up effect during reach. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the effect execution example 02AKM05. , the pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. Compared to the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that pause display may be executed as a ready-to-win effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image data is alternately and repeatedly switched between an image obtained by inverting color information drawn by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying it, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information inversion effect, uses an image drawn by converting the value of the color information included in the image data in accordance with the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132, and uses dedicated image data. It can be executed regardless of As a result, even for an effect image drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect can be executed according to the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR and the normal drawing effect NOR. can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining effect display, which is a color information reversal effect, and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the change in color of the displayed image, and the image data can be displayed while preventing an increase in the amount of image data. It is possible to enhance the impression of the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win production is any of SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3, a super-ready-to-win ready-to-win production of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability level than the case of SP reach B is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of incongruity in a display effect not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced and the interest in the game can be improved appropriately.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It may be one provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that is a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and is controlled to a big win game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content of the drawing effect pattern and the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio is high.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Also, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided near the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Then, a light-emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determined result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display are drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient if the effect image corresponding to the suspended display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling the monochrome display of such a suspended display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display, such as a suspended display and an active display, a specific drawing effect SPE , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. At the timing when the pending display is displayed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the success pattern changing effect is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the color changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect for left-handed or right-handed effects, a performance image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion effect is executed is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. In the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. If it is Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, the second promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, since the direction display layer is included in the special layer, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image prompting the shooting of the game media can be rendered and displayed using normal rendering processing instead of the specific rendering processing, so that the visibility of the image prompting the firing of the game media is appropriately ensured, and various display effects can be executed. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a grand prize entrance door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. The warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality can be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing instead of a specific drawing process. You can run it to improve your gaming interest. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that images suggesting set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to enhance amusement in a game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer can be displayed in the special layer. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in a specific layer by a specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the set value with different advantages for the player. , can improve the game interest.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, it is possible to control an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which navigation notification for notifying a stop order that is advantageous to a player according to an internal lottery result can be executed. As the navigation notification, an effect image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device to notify the stopping order in an identifiable manner. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order to stop the variable display by the left, middle and right reels, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Visibility of the image notifying the operation mode by drawing and displaying the image notifying the operation mode when stopping the variable display in the slot machine in the special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. can be appropriately ensured, various display performances can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of executing a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, an effect image is displayed according to the instruction of the display list. , and technology for game machines that draws a processed image in which multiple deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. was also proposed. In the game machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there is a possibility that the visibility of important images may deteriorate due to the change of the entire image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a game machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image,
The game machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, for example, the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, for example, drawing corresponding to image data, Specific drawing processing such as drawing processing corresponding to drawing commands for effects, for example, drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, can be executed. An image in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers includes specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having a higher priority than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer is drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for effect. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be performed using a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may convert the value of the color information included in the image data and draw (for example, color information reversal), such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, production execution period D1) in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D2 is executed. In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light, and in the second period, the light emitting means may not emit light. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period during which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as effect execution period D1 (for example, effect execution period D1), and a second period during which specific drawing processing is executed, such as effect execution period D2 (for example, effect execution period D2) etc.), the light emitting means can emit light in the normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. Suggestive effects (eg, effects according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may not be displayed as an image to be displayed by the set suggestive effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. An effect (for example, an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, in which an image is paused and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image (for example, see production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a form smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, etc.) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. Equipped with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and specific effects such as super ready-to-win effects suggesting control to an advantageous state for the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. At least in the first period, such as the effect execution period D1, among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to the drawing command of , and among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, the second period, such as the effect execution period D2, after the first period, for example In the second period, an image drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display an image drawn by As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the expectation of the player while making it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the game interest.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by means of the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, the lighting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, You may restrict|limit light emission production|presentation rather than a normal aspect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 for executing a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion effect such as an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and an image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component, or add a character image using data related to a common character image to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image In the specific layer, the specific drawing process is used to draw the effect image, and the special layer, which has a higher priority than the specific layer, is drawn by the normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in the second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the case of the second pattern in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state is different from that of the first pattern.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (which supports and fixes the game board 2). (also referred to as an underframe 3). A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and a spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back side of the board plate 200. As shown in FIG. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is viewed through the opening 2c to the player side. It can be visually recognized from (the front side). In addition, an area overlapping the board 200 in the display area of the image display device 5 is visible through the board 200 .

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rails 211 and the outer rail decorations 212 is the game ball flowing-down area in the game area Y. It is A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51. As shown in FIG.

A first effect unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at a position below the image display device 5 . A second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 . A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, the upper portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . A fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5 . In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 in which a game ball flowing down the game area Y can win a prize is provided at the right lower position of the board plate 200 .

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, they are visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board 200. ing. On the other hand, at least the front surfaces of the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are positioned in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, thereby providing a light guide plate device. The light guide plate 501 of 500 is visible from the player side.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). is. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the light-emitting regions 506 are indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting regions 507 without dots (halftone dots) are indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the region surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower regions; An LED substrate 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for making light incident on the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 is mounted, and a concentrator for concentrating the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 . and an optical lens 504 . The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51 .

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness=approximately 5 mm). It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting forward and emitting light from the light guide plate LED 502 entering from the right end surface 501a and emitting from the front surface. , a light emitting area (see halftone dot areas in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)) that emits light by light entering the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and A non-light-emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light-guiding pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, does not emit light by the light that is incident inside the light guide plate 501 . and a non-light-emitting region (see white regions in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial peripheral edge appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light forward. By emitting the light, a predetermined image is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 501 .

As shown in FIGS. 10-6B and 10-6C, the light-emitting region 506 has a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. (rough surface) is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is shown in an enlarged manner to aid understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a microscopic surface that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by means of a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (Fig. See halftone dot area at 10-5). That is, the light-emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light-guiding pattern in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501 a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface is formed from the plurality of concave portions 510 . This is an area where a dot pattern is formed, and a non- A light emitting region 507 is a region where a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also possible. Other display information including information may be displayed.

When light is not incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end face 501a, the light guide plate 501 as a whole including the light emitting region 506 is in a colorless and transparent state. The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501 . Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a substantially semicircular uneven state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501 . In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, and a groove processing method. can be

In the characteristic portion 75SG, each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 has a substantially semicircular shape in a cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be variously modified, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending vertically from a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. A plurality of semicircular projections 504A that protrude toward the light guide plate 501 in a front view are continuously formed in the vertical direction on the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502 .

Incidentally, the protrusions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LEDs 502, and one protrusion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502, for example. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6C, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, since the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. light (without light leakage) into the light guide plate 501 .

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness is gradually reduced from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Also, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 . For example, the gap is of such a size that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation and use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. Emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 enters a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has a high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The emitted light is radially diffused in the horizontal direction within the condensing lens 504 . Light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted rightward and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area of the light guide plate 501 can be expanded. can be expanded. In addition, since the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portions corresponding to the respective light guide plate LEDs 502 can emit light. Further, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total reflection in the front-rear direction. The light is emitted from the end surface on the 501 side (the portion with the smallest front-to-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

Light from the condensing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, whereupon the light is reflected toward the front side (player's side). As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by the reflected light, so that the area indicated by halftone dots in FIG. , the figure will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). As seen from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first effect unit as viewed obliquely from the front. 10-9, (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), and (C) is FIG. 10-7 It is a cross-sectional view along EE of (A). 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. and an LED board 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200 .

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is oblong in a front view, and has black surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces). The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 formed of a flat surface, a concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the flat portion 311 and shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and rear wall portions 313A to 313A located slightly behind the flat portion 311. 313D and

Above the flat portion 311, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 314A to 314E forming part of a decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. Parts 313A to 313D are visible. Incidentally, the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to incline rearward upward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surfaces of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the concave portion 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. In the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LEDs 304, which will be described later, are positioned forward of the flat portion 311. there is In addition, the concave portion 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, on the front surface of the LED board 303, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic parts (not shown) are mounted. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front. It has second translucent parts 322A and 322B mainly corresponding to the first effect LED 304 . At positions corresponding to the projections 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface. The first production LED 304 can be accommodated. In addition, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. The concave and convex portions may be formed by sandblasting, diamond cutting, or the like, and the forming method, shape, and the like can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decoration patterns 331 having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, with a decorative portion 331A formed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines extending in oblique left and right directions. A decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front are provided, and a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. .

Further, each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E is formed by, for example, sandblasting the rear surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent seal or the like. As a result, each decorative portion 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 . be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 assimilates with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are integrated. It is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between and. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the concave portion 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are mounted. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the base member 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 can be easily seen through the first translucent portion 321 from the player side. As for the first effect LED 304, it is difficult for the player to see through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. The milky-white or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, so that the milky-white or semi-transparent color appears on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12). etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is formed between two members (LED Since one decorative pattern 331 is provided across the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if it is provided on one member. It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, part of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the decoration parts 331B and 331C overlapping on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 does not overlap the LED substrate 303 and the cover. It is difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members because they are formed over substantially the entire front surface of the member 302 .

In addition, the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish between the boundary portion BD and the shape of the boundary portion BD. In addition, the LED board 303 is less conspicuous because milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, is conspicuous. By arranging the decorative portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, the decorative portion 331A may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same manner as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the pattern is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of 320, it is difficult to distinguish between them, so the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Furthermore, although the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, and are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. Further, since the printed wiring 320 is partially overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flattened hexagonal linear protrusions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. Since the decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, even in the region of the base member 301 not covered with the cover member 302, the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 is similar to the wiring pattern. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas visible from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as the predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar form as the decorative pattern 331 provided is provided, it becomes difficult to recognize that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is positioned below the upper region of the concave portion 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By being provided, it is located away from the image display device 5 which the player pays attention to, so that it is less conspicuous.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIGS. 10-12) is attached to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 303, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side or the like, which is visible from the player side. can increase

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A).

As shown in FIGS. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrated as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the lower left. In between, there are a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball) to the second start winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B A game ball path 705B into which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 having a plurality of performance LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light forward is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(First effect unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. 10-15 are diagrams for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. 10 to 16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5. The right end of the 1 effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or approach the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 . 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board 200, while the first effect unit 300 is positioned on the board 200. located on the back side of the

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A>L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction out of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 (T direction) is XA. %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, out of the light that has entered from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B (T direction), the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all of the light (100%) entering the first light-transmitting portion 321 and the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and part of the light is reflected on the front surface. , is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread to the surroundings). In particular, the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B have the light diffusing portion 322C made up of uneven portions formed on the back surface, so that the light can be transmitted in a direction different from the T direction more easily than the first light-transmitting portion 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (light transmittance is low: XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and 10-14(D), in the cover plate 702A, of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is difficult to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the rear surface, and there is no light diffusion portion like the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case of visually recognizing a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover member 302 (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED board 303) through the cover member 302 from the player side. is low in visibility, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged therearound are of the same color (black). , the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. Also, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first effect unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first effect unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the cover member 702 is seen through. Since the visibility when the LED board 303 is viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is viewed, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first effect unit 300 , the LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, feels more difficult to see. In addition, since the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around the LED board 303, are of the same color (black). The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not have the same color. For example, they may have the same color or a similar color.

Color has three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 3. Combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

Fig. 10-16 shows an example of "1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and are adjacent in terms of hue". If the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees in a predetermined number (here, 24 colors) of the color wheel, Each of the three colors is dissimilar to each other. Colors having a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as a reference color, colors that fall within the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference within an angle of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cold colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It preferably includes a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors positioned between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. As shown in FIG. , that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001 through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 so as to be visible.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and has white surfaces (front, rear, and peripheral surfaces).

The LED board 403 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401 . A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, on the back surface of the LED board 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated ) are installed multiple times. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle type LEDs capable of irradiating light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and includes a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side on the front surface of the LED board 403, the light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B of light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second production LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light forward. , and is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) such that a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which uneven portions are formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by stamper or injection. A sticking dot method in which the plate is attached with a dot-like adhesive material, a groove processing method, or the like may be used to form the reflecting portion.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 . At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a protrusion 410 having a shape slightly enlarging the LED board 403 in a front view is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of a letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 402A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In a region above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421A protruding to the back side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. In addition, in a region below the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421B protruding to the rear side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. A light diffusing portion made up of an uneven portion may also be formed on a portion of the rear surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the projection 410 upward and downward.

The plurality of ridges 421A and 421B has an uneven portion continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped portion 421C is formed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these concave and convex portions and the stepped portion 421C. The emitted light is diffused by the concave-convex portion and emitted forward.

In this way, the second effect unit 400 emits light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B, and the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is projected forward by the inner lens 405 and the cover member 402 is projected. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusion portion is formed in a portion of the cover member 402 other than the ridges 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to see the front surfaces of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the protruding portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the part BD. That is, a part of the decoration part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD. The LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous because it becomes difficult to see. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side, etc., visible from the player side. can increase

Moreover, the decorative portion 420 is provided so as to cover (overlap) the front side of the boundary portion BD in a larger area than the decorative pattern 331 described above. discreetly.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially overlaps (overlaps) a position corresponding to part of the upper side and lower side of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so as to overlap about ⅓ or more of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, since the letter "V" is displayed as the logotype in the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the character "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and includes "big hit", "BONUS", "RUSH". , characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a big hit such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!", characters such as the model name of the game machine, the title, and the name of the character appearing. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 is conspicuous due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be conscious of the boundary portion BD between and, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

In addition, the second effect LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 is conspicuous due to the surface light emission, so that the player can use the LED board 403. and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is exemplified as one decorative portion made of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, patterns) different from the decorative portion 420 are provided in a region other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations The number of parts is preferably greater than the number of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other regions. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. Any one of color, size, etc. may be different.

Moreover, the cover member 402 includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410 . By doing so, the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult for the player to see through the convex part 410 , so the LED board 403 becomes less conspicuous.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. 10-21, (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which (A) the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603; ) and the performance position shown in FIG. and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect part 630, and as shown in FIG. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front.

The LED board 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of an upright wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601 . A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 603 . The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Incidentally, the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603. The plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged in front of the LED substrate 603 are viewed from the front side. arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), on the front and back of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side is diffused and emitted forward. Surface light emission is achieved by providing the light diffusing portion 605A made up of uneven portions.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603 .

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which characters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 602A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the logo type is exemplified with the characters "XXX" indicating a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name of the gaming machine, title, appearance Characters such as character names, characters indicating variable display results such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting big hits such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!" may be used. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, the third effect unit 600 emits light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further emitted from the cover member 602. The light is diffused through and emitted forward, so that the entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decoration portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX". It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620 . By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, "XXX" is displayed. Since the periphery of the character is lit up, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission effect portion 630, has one end rotatably supported about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect part 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if it can transmit power so that the light emission effect part 630 can move in the vertical direction, it can be a rack gear and a pinion gear. There may be.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, a base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is shaped like a box with an open front surface. In addition, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller than the base member 801 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801 . A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803 . The fourth effect LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs capable of emitting light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803 , and are arranged along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803 . The surface of the LED substrate 803 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is placed in a region surrounded by the plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803 .

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back surface of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting forward, The light is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 . More specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 of the standing walls erected along the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, and does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. A light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 802, and is made up of an uneven portion, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, the fourth effect unit 800 emits light from the fourth effect LED 804 , and the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802 . By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have base members 601, 801 and LED substrates 603, 803 whose surfaces are the same white color. 801 and the front side of the LED substrates 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third production LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth production LED 804 are lit. It is

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side thereof is the cover. It is covered by member 602 . However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusion portion 602A is formed in the cover member 602, the player can see through the cover member 602. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, the inner lens 605 having the light diffusion portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize it.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the standing wall of the same white base member 601 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, the LED substrate 603 is arranged on the surrounding base member. Assimilated with 601, the boundary BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602 is obscure. In other words, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side thereof is covered with a cover member 802 . However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the cover member 802 is provided with the light diffusing portion 802A, the player can see through the cover member 802. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 and the surrounding base member 801 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle-type LED in which light is incident from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area than the inner lens 605 where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed. The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the side is the same as that of the LED board including the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED board 803 is more conspicuous than the LED board 603 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), and the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is forward (player side) of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23). The light emission mode of the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface light emission, while the light emission mode of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is flashing (see FIG. 10-25). 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is positioned closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the visibility when viewed from the player's side is higher than that of the fourth effect unit 800 as the effect means. That is, in the vicinity of the fourth effect unit 800, the third effect unit 600, which is effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuous than the 4 effect unit 800 and attracts the player's attention, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is positioned close to the player, and , By emitting light with strong light, a mode configured as a rendering means having higher visibility than the LED substrate 803 and the base member 801 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third rendering The light emitting effect section 630 of the unit 600 is different from the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 in at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode, thereby improving visibility. should be high.

In addition, the front surface of the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 serving as effect means is colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part with a color that is highly visible is provided. Also, the visibility of the light emitting effect portion 630 may be easily enhanced by using the cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Further, the visibility of the light emission effect section 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emission mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, as the rendering means, a mode in which the light emitting rendering section 630 of the third rendering unit 600 capable of emitting light by the light emitting means and operable by the rendering motor 631 is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be light emitting means (such as a lamp portion) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be driven by a predetermined drive source. It may be a production unit fixed at a predetermined position without operating.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed in the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to protrude forward beyond the game board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing over the upper part of the game area Y. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game arcade, the area E1 (the area indicated by halftone dots in the drawing) below the projection 3A is shaded by the projection 3A blocking external light from the game arcade. It gets dark.

Therefore, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, so that the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the projecting part 3A. so it becomes less noticeable.

In addition, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protrusion 3A is provided that protrudes toward the player side of the LED boards 603 and 803. The protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( 10-23), the LED boards 603 and 803 become inconspicuous because they are shadowed by the projecting portion 3A.

In addition, although the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are white, the present invention is not limited to this. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are more likely to be lost in the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less conspicuous.

In this embodiment, as the projecting portion projecting toward the player side above the electronic components and the specific member, a projecting portion 3A projecting above the LED substrates 603 and 803 toward the player side is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the projecting portion is not limited to a projecting portion protruding from a part of the game machine frame 3. For example, the game board 2 or the game machine It may be composed of other game devices (for example, a winning ball device, etc.) or a performance device provided in the region Y. FIG. In addition, the projecting part 3A is not only fixed on the front surface of the game machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the projecting position at a predetermined timing, thereby allowing the player to move above the electronic parts and specific members. It may be a protruding part that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 corresponds to the movement of the light emitting effect section 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

Specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light. It becomes invisible or invisible through 501 . That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the light guide plate LED 502 to light up the light guide plate LED 502 at least during the movement period in which the light emission effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position and the effect period during which the light emission area is located. 506 to emit light, the light emission effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become invisible or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side. It is possible to suppress conspicuousness of the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 .

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is extinguished and the light emitting effect of the light emitting area 506 ends after the light emitting effect part 630 moves to the effect position, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting effect part By lighting the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission effect part 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) operably provided in this manner are visible to the player during the waiting period of waiting at the origin position and the movement period. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or invisible from the player's side at least during the effect period in which it is positioned at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic parts from becoming conspicuous during the presentation period in which the player pays attention.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG of the present embodiment,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
By doing so, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
It should be noted that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to arbitrary colors as long as they have similar colors. In addition, the electronic component and the specific member may be of the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, light-emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board (the main board 11 not (including control board 12, relay board, etc.);

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, as the specific member, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member provided around electronic components. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, a member that constitutes a part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3) a member constituting a part, etc.).

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting a part of the unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated is applied as the translucent member is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If the member is provided so that the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member, a different member (for example, A member forming part of another unit, a member forming part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to having the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components on the back side. , non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without partially overlapping when visually recognized. In addition, if the specific member is placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player side, the electronic component and the specific member are arranged apart in the vertical, horizontal, front and rear directions, etc. may have been

In addition, the specific member provided around the electronic component includes the specific member provided at a position where the electronic component can be seen from the player side, for example, it is arranged within a range of about 5 cm away from the electronic component. A specific member may be included.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency is applied as the translucent member was exemplified. The material is not limited, and any material can be used as long as it is a member having translucency, such as a glass material. Further, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color, as long as the player can visually recognize the electronic parts and the specific member through the member. Also, the light transmittance may not be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members allow the player to see the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components through the members. and a part or all of the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least part of the electronic component provided that the electronic component and the specific member are visible together, even if at least part of the specific member is not made visible through the member. It is good if there is

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members include the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 301 as specific members. 401, 601, and 801 are arranged along the electronic component and the specific member on the front side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are not necessarily arranged along the electronic component and the specific member. It does not have to be. In other words, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the entire surfaces of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 have a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of the portions of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If so, the entire surface area does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific members may be colored during molding of the members, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be given a predetermined color by affixing a sticker or the like. may be

Further, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a predetermined electronic device that is provided in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player separately from the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members. Components (for example, first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, first start switch 22A, second member for fixing starting switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.). , and predetermined members (for example, members for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are preferably of a different color.

In this way, the predetermined electronic parts such as the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc., which are provided so as to be difficult or invisible to the player, must be balanced with the predetermined members that fix them. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to a color that has the same hue and has a higher lightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. It is possible to make the electronic components relatively inconspicuous.

In addition, by coloring the light-transmitting member with the same color as the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Also, for example, when electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, the electronic components are provided on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, around the electronic components. Separately from the specific member, by providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color to the electronic component so as to be visible to the player, the black members are arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. As a result, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and the electronic parts can be made less conspicuous. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member having the same color as the electronic component or a similar color to the electronic component separately from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed in the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic portion 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 become inconspicuous, so that the effect can be favorably displayed.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling not to be done, electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) around (for example, game effect lamp 9 , etc.) may be controlled so as not to be executed (or the amount of light is made lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to prevent electronic parts and specific members from being conspicuous due to the execution of the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted. can.

In addition, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the light-transmitting member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can emit surface light. For a light-emitting member such as the LED 404A that is inconspicuous even if it continues to emit light, the amount of light may be maintained (the execution may not be restricted) even when controlling so as not to execute the light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic parts and the specific members inconspicuous without excessively lowering the presentation effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the gaming machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which is stored after being subtracted. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, it is also possible to execute a variable display and to control a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ), which includes electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided to be visible to the player, and electronic components provided around the electronic components and formed in the same color as the electronic components A specific member (for example, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801) and a translucent member provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. and an optical member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802), wherein the translucent member (e.g., cover member 302) includes the electronic component (e.g., LED substrate 303) and the specific member (e.g., Base member 301) has a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern 331) formed to straddle (see FIGS. 10-12), and further, light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, Attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), a display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific display (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display, A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light. In the display effect, the specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 ( A) ~ Fig. 15-32 (H), Fig. 15-49 (A) ~ Fig. 15-50 (D), the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize is lit before the display of the pending display is completed. part), the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 24, the winning flash When the effect is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is the first light emitting means (for example, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d), wherein the first light emitting means emits the specific light emitting effect is started to a predetermined timing (for example, the period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term), and from the predetermined timing to the target of the specific light emitting effect. In a second period up to a specific timing of a certain variable display (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning), the specific lighting effect is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash During the effect execution period, the part that blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first period, and the light is emitted in the second period. Light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are illuminated during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning)) game machine.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of the display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and during the first period of the specific light emission effect, the By causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, so that the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. becomes even easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and to make the game machine easy for a player to recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emission performance by means of the light emission mode of the light emitting means. can be done. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that looks good when installed in a game arcade and whose effects are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and a variable display can be executed as an example of a form of a gaming machine that makes it easier for a player to recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emission effect. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to players, and is capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c) , movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F), display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display, and a predetermined condition a specific display effect for displaying the specific display (for example, a portion where the pending display or the active display is displayed in any of the display patterns α to γ) based on what has been established (for example, the occurrence of the start winning); A specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light; The specific light emission effect is executed so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed (for example, FIGS. 15-28, 15-29 (A) to As shown in FIGS. 15-32 (H) and FIGS. 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D), the part that lights the winning flash lamp 135SG009F before the display of the pending display is completed) , the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. If the winning flash effect is not executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means includes the first light emitting means (for example, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F), A second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable body lamp 9d) is included, and the first light emitting means starts the specific light emitting effect. to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term), and the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect from the predetermined time. (for example, the period from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display ready-to-win effect, which is the target of the winning flash effect), in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect execution period inside is a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2), the second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first period, and changes to the variable display being executed in the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d have the brightness C1 In addition, the part that blinks at the period T1 and blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T0 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter period) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(form)
The game machine of form A1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 15). -28, Figures 15-29(A) to 15-32(H), Figures 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), from before the display of the pending indication is completed The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIGS. 15-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. It is characterized by a portion that flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the period) and @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in Fig. 15-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start effect execution process, thereby displaying an appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top. part), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 15-15, FIG. 15-30 (D) to As shown in FIGS. 15-32 (H) and FIGS. 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific display rotation display effect execution process to display a pending display or an active display. The part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 and The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A1 or form A2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), the specific display When the display start effect B is executed, the win flash lamp 135SG009F as the win flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c are movable from the timing before the display start of the pending display or the active display. The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a character A is the first display mode). After acting on the reserved memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A, it can be displayed in a specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the reserved display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A) to 15-50 (D) , Winning flash effect starts before the end timing of specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 15-28, FIG. 15-29 (A), FIG. As shown in 15-29(B), FIG. 15-49(A), and FIG. 15-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
The "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only the state of emitting light at low luminance but also the state of not emitting light.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emission effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), FIGS. 15-49 (A) to 15-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 15-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before either the completion of display of the specific display or the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIGS. 15-28 , Figures 15-29 (A) ~ Figure 15-32 (H), Figures 15-49 (A) ~ Figure 15-50 (D), execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined according to the start winning. If this is done, after the sound output corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light in a more intense manner than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement in the game due to the hindrance of other performances caused by the light emission.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The second period includes a period before execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and a period during execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 15-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or form A11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means in the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby hindering other displays and increasing the enjoyment of the game. decline can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to form A13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. .

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to form A15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound as the late winning flash effect, the emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, by selecting the late winning flash effect process table and resetting and starting the process timer for the late winning flash effect process table, the late winning flash effect (the winning flash Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A ) ~ as shown in Fig. 15-89(n), even during the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-70(A) to 15-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the previous variable display symbol fixing period, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to form A20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. is a game machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 15-33 (J) , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect is started, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to form A23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-106 (O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-90, during the white-out period, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize is turned off, and from the subsequent start timing of reach effect of super reach, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize is turned on at luminance C2) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emitting mode does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to form A23 or form A24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIG. 15-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 15-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , As shown in FIG. 15-90, during the execution period of the movable body operation suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash is performed from the subsequent start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F for the display with the brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, light can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-108 (A) as modification 135SG-3 , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 15-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part that continues lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form A27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-119 (A) and 15-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-reach effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the winning flash effect is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A28 is the gaming machine according to form A27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form A29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 15-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 15-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light effect can be changed to the light emission in the mode according to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 15-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIG. 15- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A32 is the gaming machine according to form A31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red, as shown in FIGS. 15-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily recognized by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A33 is the gaming machine according to form A31 or form A32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and in a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form A34 is the gaming machine according to form A33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 shown in FIGS. 15-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed in the display pattern ε, the part where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form A35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A36 is the gaming machine according to form A35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as a winning flash effect). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-129 (L) and 15-130 (N) as modification 135SG-7 , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A37 is the gaming machine according to form A35 or form A36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , During the execution of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form A38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 15-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form A39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A35 to A38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 15-28, 15-42(a) to 15-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emission means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting device at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form A41 is the gaming machine according to form A40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form A42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A39 to A41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form A43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is established when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the modification 135SG-8, the first start port is operated during the execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or shorter than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form A45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in Example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form A46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is satisfied by passing the game medium;
a specific light-emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light-emitting modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A47 is the gaming machine according to form A46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A portion where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A48 is the gaming machine according to form A46 or form A47,
The light emission area of the first light emission means is larger than the light emission area of the specific light emission means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emission area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S is the target of the holding display notice effect after the starting winning is generated. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form A49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A46 to A48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery processing in step S904. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and step S906 are executed. The setting change process of S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 14 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 14 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F modeled after the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 15-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of circular reserved displays, and a circular reserved display of the number of the second special figure reserved storage. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are arranged vertically. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

15-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 15-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "loss" or a "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 15-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 15-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 15-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 15-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects one of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 135SG with reference to FIG. 15-7(B), in the present characteristic portion 135SG, as the jackpot type, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG is such that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is performed once, are common normal reach reach performance. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characterizing section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 15-9, the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effects, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern determination table, and use the special winning variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern as PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, there is a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 135SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the content of the pending memory satisfying the start condition ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 15-11(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the start buffer value, which is the stored value of the start buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up winning designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 15-12 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 135 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, and specifies that it is a time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 15-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 15-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 15-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 15-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 15-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 15-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

When the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting gate winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

In step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a design designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

In step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. After the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect. For executing a specific display rotation display effect (see FIGS. 15-19 (B-1) to 15-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the suspended display or active display Specific display rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-reading notice in this feature part 135SG, variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is performed. Starting lamp light emission effect execution processing (step 135SG165) for executing the starting lamp light emission effect of causing the starting lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the reserved display/active display based on the reserved memory until the end , and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 15-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 15-15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry in which the display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). When the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 25%; It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display and the active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be missed is the highest when the target is set (expectation for big hit according to display color of pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIGS. 15-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a mode in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 15-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 15-15 as the specific display display start effect execution processing. In the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). Whether or not the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether the start winning designation command reception flag is set). ) is determined (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135 SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is subject to the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display display start effect (step 135SGS259), and executes specific display display start effect execution processing. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (specific display display start The process timer for effect A or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (the specific display start effect being executed) is decremented by 1. process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed does not time out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed. (Step 135 SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect during execution has timed out (step 135 SGS261; Y), whether or not the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). When the final process timer for specific display start effect times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is terminated (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is terminated. If the final specific display display start rendering process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), process data switching is executed, the next specific display display start rendering process timer is started, and the next specific display is started. The effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for display start effect (steps 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, and step 135SGS266), and the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present characterizing portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) based on the starting prize, or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation is displayed in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top as the specific display display start effect A. be.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other suspended displays and active displays as the specific display rotating display effect described above. Transition to display with rotation animation in .

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a prefetching notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 15-20 (A) to 15-20 (C) and FIGS. 15-20 (C-1) to 15-20 (C-4), as the specific display display start effect B, first, On the image display device 5, an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold indication is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic part 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display display start effect B is finished. It is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. need. Then, the suspended display after the end of the specific display display start effect B is transferred to the rotation animation display in the first suspended memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, when the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start win and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the starting prize, as in FIGS. 15-20(C-1) to 15-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds. The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display rotating display effect described above.

FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 15-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 15-24, when the result of the variable display is a failure, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 15-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the object of flash effect at the time of winning is set to the flag for flash effect at the time of winning of the entry (entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 15-26 (A) and 15-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Also, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be repeatedly output. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as a sound corresponding to the notice effect and a sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If not (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effects has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last period has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

In step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 15-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half to the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect of the target variable display super reach. Flashing is performed in a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and the silhouette image of the character A imitated by the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning in the image display device 5. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit white or red light in the same manner as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. In addition, since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower brightness than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 15-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is as follows. It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period except during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation at step 135SGS284, that is, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 will Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning after decreasing the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is the variable display for flash effects at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the pattern confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 15-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of pending memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 15-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice effect according to the result of the determination. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the forewarning effect in the characterizing portion 135SG is a dialogue foretelling effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the design determination command is received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is processed for special symbols. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decoration design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device when executing the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-28 to 15-68. First, FIGS. 15-28 are timing charts in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. FIG. 15-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the starting winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 15-29 to 15-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 15-49 to 15-68 show that a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the winning-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

15-29 to 15-48 ``When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning'', the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in Figs. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 15-27 (A) to Fig. 15-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 15-28 and FIG. 15-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-30(C), and 15-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this characteristic part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 15-32 (G) and FIG. 15 -32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect for the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-32 (G), and 15-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the first-term winning flash effect and the start timing of the second-term winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D). That is, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

15-32(H), 15-33(I), and 15-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be changed according to which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 15-32(H) and 15-33(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in duplicate, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (J), 15-34 (K) and 15-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 (K) to 15-41 (Z), in the variable display before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (S) to 15-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 15-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern and a small display. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (Y) and 15-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-40 (W) and 15-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-42(a) and 15-42(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-43(c) to 15-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-43(d) and 15-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 15-45(g) to 15-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-46 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 15-45(g) and 15-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-48 (m) and 15-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emission effect is From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the above-described winning flash effect. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning).

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 15-27 (A) to Fig. 15-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (sound corresponding to the advance notice production) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 15-28 and FIG. 15-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-50(C), and 15-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect for winning a prize (previous flash effect for winning a prize) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 15-19 (B-1) to Fig. 15-19 (B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 15-29 to 15-29). (See Fig. 15-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started. there is

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in this characterizing portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the previous winning flash effect.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, 15-52 (G) and 15-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 15-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

15-52(H), 15-53(I), and 15-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 15-52(H) and 15-53(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-53 (J), 15-54 (K) and 15-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-53(J), the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-54(K) to 15-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-58 (S) to 15-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 15-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 , the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-61 (Y) and 15-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 15-60 (W) and 15-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-62(a) and 15-62(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-63(c) to 15-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 15-63(d) and 15-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 15-65(g) to 15-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 15-65(g) and 15-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-66 (j)), the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed as the late winning flash effect. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-68 (m) and 15-68 (n), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light (lighting at the brightness C1) according to the ready-to-win effect, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. . Incidentally, as the ready-to-win effect sound in the feature part 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect. . Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 15-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash presentation, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the execution period of the latter winning flash presentation. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start winning occurs during the variable display, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A with the display pattern α to the display pattern γ (holding display notice After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. The rotating display may be executed, and the winning flash effects (early winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) may be executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-15, 15-30 (D) to 15-32 (H), and 15-49 (B) to 15-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is 15-15, FIGS. 15-30(D) to 15-32(H), and FIGS. 15-49(B) to 15 As shown in -50 (D), it is composed of a part displayed as a suspended display and a rotation animation, and as shown in Figures 15-19 and 15-20, the timing when the appearance animation of the suspended display is completed , the rotation animation of the hold display is started, so that the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) to 15-32 (H), when the specific display display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, as a flash effect at the time of winning Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 15-49(A) to 15-50(D), even when the specific display display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 15-50(D), since the win-time flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any of the display patterns α to γ. Even so, since the win-time flash performance can be started before the end of the specific display display start performance, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the win-time flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 15-28, Figure 15-29 (A), Figure 15-29 (B), Figure 15-49 (A), and Figure 15-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, C3 is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the ``low luminance state'' in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light with low luminance, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n) and FIGS. 15-49(A) to 15-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effects can be executed depending on whether or not they are being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effects during execution of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 15-28, Figure 15-29 (A) to Figure 15-32 (H), Figure 15-49 (A) to Figure 15-50 (D), when winning according to the start winning When execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize, the flash at the time of prize is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a luminance C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a luminance C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning the latter period, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the second winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific form with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period in which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in game interest has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, other effects at the time of winning It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29(A) to 15-48(n), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, before the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the pattern fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention is exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term is completed, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the special pattern (see FIGS. 15-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-42(a) to 15-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning, and the interest of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, during the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 15-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce discomfort when blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect object due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement due to a decrease in attention to the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ that differ in the degree of expectation of a big hit. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing part 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 to 15-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-69 and 15-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L, 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 15-27 (A) to Fig. 15-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 15-69 and FIG. 15-70 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 15-69 and FIG. 15-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-71(C), and 15-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the object of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in this modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter period (Fig. 15-73 (G) and See Figure 15-73 (H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-73 (G) and 15-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 15-27(A) to 15-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-74(I) and 15-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 15-74 (J), 15-75 (K) and 15-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-69, 15-76 (M) and 15-76 (N), during the pattern fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the latter The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the flashing of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 15-75(K) to 15-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the winning flash effect sound from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the late winning time is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-79 (S) to 15-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Fig. 15-81 ( Refer to W) In this variation 135SG-1, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and a special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as the flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 15-81(W), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display to which the flash effect for winning is to be performed, the flash effect for winning is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-82 (Y) and 15-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-81 (W) and 15-81 (X), during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-83(a) and 15-83(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 15-84(c) to 15-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 15-84(d) and 15-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 15-86(g) to 15-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-89 (m) and 15-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 15-69, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emission effect is From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in this modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 again selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of sound corresponding to winning flash effect, emission of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, display of silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the effect, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 15-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 15-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach productions of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach production of super reach, the reach production of super reach α and the reach production of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

Especially in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach effects with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (e.g., an upper position of the image display device 5) and an effect position (e.g., a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a winning flash effect. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

In this way, during the white-out period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the motion of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the rendering position (when the movable body motion rendering is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, if the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-91(B), 15-92(C), and 15-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 15-93(E) to 15-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-95 (I) to 15-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (A) and FIGS. 15-96 (K) to 15-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90(A), 15-98(O) and 15-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, output of a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIGS. 15-99 (A) and 15-99 (B) When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 15-99(B), 15-100(C), and 15-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 15-101(E) to 15-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 15-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-103 (I) to 15-104 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B) and FIGS. 15-104 (K) to 15-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body action suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body motion suggesting rendering ends, as shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 15-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 15-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 15-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 15-90 (B), 15-107 (Q) and 15-107 (R), super reach on the image display device 5 from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are completed. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 15-96(K) to 15-98(O) and FIGS. 15-104(K) to 15-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. Then, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in accordance with the execution of the movable body motion effect (moving the movable body 32 to the motion effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning lights up at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-108(B) and 15-114(A) to 15-118(F), step-up effects are executed during the variable display in which the winning flash effects are being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (for example, the upper position of the image display device 5) to the effect position (for example, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which of the light emission modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since it may be during the execution period of ready-to-win performance, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning is during the execution period of moving body action performance or during the execution period of super-ready-to-win performance. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 15-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win is different between the case of using the light emission mode and the case of using the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body motion effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggesting motion of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash motion motion suggesting motion of the winning prize. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (reserved display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white round shape, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red round display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of , as a pending display or active display is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation for the big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for the big win may be set lower than the display pattern α, or may be set lower than the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and low for the display pattern β.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the display patterns for the pending display and the active display. The display pattern α may also be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, the characterizing section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display notice effect (a display pattern β or a display pattern β for displaying a pending display or an active display) and the display pattern, and determines whether to execute a winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in this modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an action rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first effect effect have different effects. A second effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action effect is executed as the first effect effect or the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for execution in action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display pattern of the specific display may be changed to the display pattern β or γ as a result of acting on another character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-121 (A) and 15-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the display is variable, the first start opening is won When (start winning) occurs and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. 15-121(B-1), the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character.

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 15-122(A) and 15-122(B), the When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 15-122(C) and 15-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-123(G) and 15-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-123(I) and 15-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friend character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to be displayed. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, the display patterns of the pending display and the active display are the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε in the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed with the display pattern δ, the specific display display start effect A (see FIGS. 15-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is executed. is displayed in the display pattern ε, the specific display display start effect B (see FIG. 15-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is specified as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form of displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with blinking of the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-124 (A) and 15-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 15-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-125(C) and 15-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the period T1 is started. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Also, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. , an animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 15-20 (D-1) to 15-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-127 (G) and 15-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2. , Blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1) of winning flash lamp 135SG009F, brightness C2 and blinking at cycle T2 of game effect lamp 9 excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y (Fig. 15- 27(A) to FIG. 15-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

15-128(I) and 15-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 15-128 (J), 15-129 (K) and 15-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-128(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 15-129(K) and 15-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 15-130 (M) and 15-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 displays a combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M indicating a failure. Derived display is performed (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash performance at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 15-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the pattern determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case is provided in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is illustrated in a form in which it can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 15-40, etc.) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be overlapped and displayed. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for informing the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol stops in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting win is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining variable display period and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are performed. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the winning starting flash effect. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp light emission effect is started. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect, the flashing period of the starter lamp 135SG009S is set as the flashing period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this manner, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-28, when executing the winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 15-28, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined in accordance with the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F flashes with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, blinks the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 temporarily. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It can be executed, and the change in the light emission mode as the winning flash effect differs depending on the lamp (characteristic part 135SG, FIGS. 15-1 to 15-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 15-69 to 15-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving the movable body before the reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 15-90 to 15-107), it is possible to execute a step-up effect during variable display, and when the step-up effect is executed when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, flash at the time of winning While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 15-108 to 15-118) that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the flash lamp at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different depending on whether the lighting mode changes (Modified example 135SG-4, Fig. 15-119). Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 15- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern ε is changed to any one of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (variation 135SG- 6, FIGS. 15-121 to 15-123), in which the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the winning flash effect (modification 135SG-7, FIG. 15-124 to FIG. 15-130), etc., but as a pachinko game machine of the present invention, it is possible to combine two or more characteristic portions or modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions or modifications. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game is at least the predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
75SG001 pachinko machine 300 first effect unit 301 base member 302 cover member 303 LED board 331 decoration pattern 400 second effect unit 401 base member 402 cover member 403 LED board 420 decoration part 600 third effect unit 800 fourth effect unit 801 base Member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
The display means provides a pending animation after the specific display is displayed at a fixed position when the starting condition is met and the specific light emitting effect is executed, and Displaying in a common manner a pending animation after the specific display is displayed at a fixed position when not executed,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a first specific effect suggesting control to the advantageous state and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect during one variable display,
The light emitting means
When the first specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the first specific effect is started, and the first specific effect is performed. When is started, start emitting light in a manner corresponding to the first specific effect,
When the second specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the second specific effect is started, and the second specific effect is performed. When is started, start emitting light in a manner corresponding to the second specific effect,
When the light emission in the mode corresponding to the first specific effect is started from the light emission in the mode according to the specific light emission effect, and the light emission in the mode according to the specific light emission effect to the light emission in the mode according to the second specific effect is started and the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect that differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first special aspect,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
There are a case where the specific display is displayed in the special mode and a case where the specific display is displayed in the first special mode without being displayed in the special mode, based on the establishment of the starting condition,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the rate at which the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode without being displayed in the special mode. Expensive, amusement machine.

Images